2005 Escape www.hillerford.com

2005 Escape
www.hillerford.com Table of Contents
Introduction
4
Instrument Cluster
10
Warning and control lights
Gauges
10
14
Entertainment Systems
17
AM/FM
AM/FM
AM/FM
AM/FM
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
with CD
cassette with CD
with in-dash six CD
with CD/MP3
Climate Controls
Heater only
Manual heating and air conditioning
Rear window defroster
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Message center
17
20
24
32
44
44
45
46
47
47
51
53
58
58
60
63
64
65
69
Locks and Security
87
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
87
87
94
1
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire Information
Tire Inflation
Changing tires
Lug Nut Torque
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing
Driving
99
99
106
120
133
144
147
148
151
163
173
180
185
186
Starting
Brakes
Transmission operation
186
190
193
Roadside Emergencies
212
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Cleaning
2
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
212
213
213
214
221
226
228
236
237
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine Coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Refill capacities
Lubricant specifications
243
245
247
251
253
259
274
274
275
278
Accessories
284
Index
287
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2004 Ford Motor Company
3
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
5
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage,
Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L Power Stroke
Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions
Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description
of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide
that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
6
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.
7
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side
Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction
Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
8
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Emission System
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check fuel cap
Low tire warning
MAX
MIN
9
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
10
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service
engine soon warning light to come on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Without message center
With message center
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
!
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your dealership. Illumination after
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake
system should be inspected immediately by your servicing dealership.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer immediately.
Anti-lock brake system:
Illuminates indicating an ABS fault.
ABS
If the lamp stays on for more than a
few seconds, then an ABS fault is
indicated, have the system serviced
immediately. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning
light also is illuminated.
11
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately. A chime will also
sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been
detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter).
Without message center
With message center
Overdrive off: Illuminates when
O/D
the overdrive function of the
OFF
transmission has been turned off,
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
12
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Four wheel drive indicator (if equipped): Illuminates when ignition
is first turned ON to check bulb. Blinking indicator indicates system has
been disabled or requires service.
Without message center
With message center
Displays when four-wheel drive
system requires service.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the Securilock娂 Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the ignition is in the ON position and any
door is open.
Without message center
With message center
Displays which door, liftgate or
liftgate glass is open.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
13
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Turn signal warning chime: Sounds when the turn signal lever has
been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is
driven more than 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
14
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
To reset, tap on the trip reset
button to toggle the display between
the trip and the odometer. Holding
the reset button for one or two
seconds will reset the trip odometer to zero.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
15
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow near the fuel pump icon
indicates which side of the vehicle
the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
16
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO / SINGLE CD RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
14 15 16 17 18
13
1
2
3
4
6
5
VOL - PUSH ON
AM
FM
SCN
ST
FM1
BASS
TREB
BAL
FADE
CD
CLK
12
DISC
SEEK
EJ
TUNE
COMP
11
CD
1
10
CD
2
SHUFFLE
3
9
4
5
6
8
7
/
1. BAL (Balance): Press
to shift sound to the left/right
speakers.
/
to shift
2. FADE: Press
sound to the front/rear speakers.
3. SCN (Scan): Press to hear a
brief sampling of all listenable
stations or CD tracks. Press again to
stop.
4. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,
press and hold CLK and press SEEK
or increase
the
to decrease
hours.
CLK
17
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease
or increase
the minutes.
5. EJ (Eject): Press to eject a CD.
6. COMP (Compression): In CD
mode, press to bring louder and
softer levels into more comfortable
listening level. The compression icon (c) will appear in the display.
SHUFFLE
7. SHUFFLE: Press to listen to the
6
tracks on the CD in random order.
Press again to turn off.
8. Memory presets: To set a
CD
CD
SHUFFLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station. Press and
hold a preset button until sound returns. This radio is equipped with six
station memory preset controls which allow you to set up to six AM
stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
: Press and hold until
9. CD
desired point of a selection is
reached.
CD: Press and hold until
10.
desired point of a selection is
reached.
11. TUNE: In radio mode, press to
move up or down the frequency
band in individual increments.
12. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station, selection or track.
13. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
18
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode or
to play a CD already loaded into the
system.
15. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode.
/
to
16. BASS: Press
increase/decrease the bass output.
/
17. TREB (Treble): Press
to increase/decrease the treble
output.
DISC
18. CD slot: Insert a CD printed
side up.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.
19
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase/decrease
volume.
2. SCAN: Press to hear a brief
SCAN
sampling of all listenable stations,
tape selections or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
3. CD slot: Insert a CD with the
label side up.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
20
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
4. Cassette door: Insert the
cassette with the opening to the
right.
5. EJ (Eject): Press to eject the
cassette/CD. The radio will resume
playing.
6. TAPE: Press to start tape play.
Press to stop tape during
rewind/fast forward.
CD: Press to start CD play. With the
dual media audio, press CD to
toggle between single CD and CD
changer play (if equipped).
7. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to the
playing media.
8. AUTO: Press to set first six
strongest stations (if available) into
AM, FM1 or FM2 memory buttons;
press again to return to normal
stations.
9. CLK (Clock): Press to toggle
between station mode and clock
mode. Press and hold to set the
SEEK to
clock. Press the
to
decrease hours or SEEK
increase hours. Press the
TUNE
21
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
to decrease minutes or TUNE
to increase minutes. If your vehicle
has a stand alone clock this control will not function.
10. BAL (Balance): Press BAL;
/
to shift
then press SEL
sound to the left/right speakers.
FADE: Press FADE; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
rear/front speakers.
11. Memory preset buttons: To
set a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM, tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
12. SHUFFLE: Works in CD mode.
Press to play tracks in random
order. Press again to disable.
13. COMP (Compression): Works
in CD mode. Press to bring soft and
loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level. A small “c”
will appear in the display to indicate that compression is enabled. Press
again to disable.
Dolby威 noise reduction:
14.
Works in tape mode only. Reduces
tape noise and hiss; press to
activate/deactivate.
The Dolby威 noise reduction system is manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby威 and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
22
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
15. SIDE 1–2: Works in tape mode
only. Press to play reverse side of
the tape.
16. FF (Fast Forward): In CD
FF
2
mode, press for a slow advance,
press and hold for a fast advance. In
TAPE mode, press FF to enable
Fast Forward feature. Press FF or TAPE to resume tape play.
17. REW (Rewind): In CD mode,
REW
1
press for a slow reverse, press and
hold for a fast reverse. In TAPE
mode, press REW to enable the
rewind feature. Press REW or TAPE to resume tape play.
18. SEL (Select): Use with Bass,
SEL
Treble, Balance and Fade controls.
19. BASS: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
TREB (Treble): Press TREB; then
/
to
press SEL
decrease/increase the treble output.
20. TUNE: Works in radio mode
/
to
only. Press TUNE
change frequency down/up.
SEEK
TUNE
23
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station, selection or track.
SEEK
TUNE
22. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
MACH姞 300 SATELLITE READY SOUND SYSTEM RADIO
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station or track.
2. REW (Rewind): In CD mode,
press until desired selection is
reached.
FF (Fast forward): In CD mode, press until desired selection is
reached.
24
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit
to enable Satellite reception is available through your Ford dealer.
Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
3. DSP (Digital Signal
Processing): Press DSP to access
the Ambiance menu. Ambiance gives
the feeling of “being there” to your
music, creating increased clarity as well as an open and spacious feel to
the music. Press SEL to engage/disengage. Turn the volume control to
increase/decrease the level of ambiance.
Occupancy: Press DSP again to change the occupancy mode to optimize
sound for:
• ALL SEATS — Enhances acoustic sound for all seating locations.
• DRIVERS SEAT — Enhances acoustic sound for the driver. Rear seat
and passenger seat performance may be compromised in favor of the
driver.
• REAR SEATS - Enhances acoustic sound for the rear seat passengers.
4. MUTE: Press to mute the playing
media.
5. EJ (Eject): Press EJ and choose
the corresponding preset (1–6) to
eject the desired CD. Press and hold
to eject all loaded discs.
6. BASS: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
TREB (Treble): Press TREB; then
/
to
press SEL
decrease/increase the treble output.
7. SEL (Select): Use with Bass,
Treble, Balance and Fade controls to
adjust levels.
25
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
8. BAL (Balance): Press BAL; then
/
to shift sound to
press SEL
the right/left speakers.
FADE: Press FADE; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
front/rear speakers.
9. MENU: Press MENU and SEL to
access clock mode, RDS on/off,
Traffic, Program type, Show type
and Compression modes.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS
) or decrease (
) the
is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is
broadcasting RDS data). Traffic information is not available in most
U.S. markets.
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters and format.
Compression: With a CD playing, press to bring soft and loud CD
passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode.
Shuffle: With a CD playing, press to play tracks in a random order.
Press MENU until SHUFFLE appears in the display. Use SEL to select
SHUFFLE DISC, SHUFFLE TRAC or SHUFFLE OFF.
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, press to access the desired disc.
11. SAT (if equipped): Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped
with Satellite Ready capability. The
kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through your Ford dealer.
Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
26
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
12. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
Autoset: Allows you to set the
strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set
preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Press and momentarily hold AM/FM.
AUTOSET will flash on the display. When the six strongest stations are
filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less
than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the
remaining presets. Press again to disengage.
13. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
Speed sensitive volume (if equipped): Radio volume changes
automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and
wind noise. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and
level 7 is the maximum setting.
Press and hold the volume control for five seconds. Then press SEL to
) or decrease (
) the volume setting. The level will
increase (
appear in the display.
14. LOAD: Press LOAD and the
corresponding preset (1–6) to load a
CD into the desired slot. Press and
hold to load up to six discs at once.
15. CD AUX: Press to access CD or
AUX mode.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.
27
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
16. SCAN: Press to move up the
radio frequency band. SCAN
automatically finds a station, plays it
for five seconds, then moves to the next station. Press again to stop.
CD: Press to sample CD selections for eight seconds. Press again to stop.
17. DISC/TUNE: Radio: Press
or
to manually tune down or up
the radio frequency band. CD:
to select the previous disc or
Press
to select the next disc.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit
to enable Satellite reception is available through your Ford dealer.
Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
18. CD door: Insert disc label side
up.
For information regarding SIRIUS
Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
28
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH SIX CD MODULAR AUDIO (IF EQUIPPED)
1. CD: To begin CD play, press
LOAD. When the system is ready to
accept a disc, IN will appear on the
radio display. You may then insert a CD. The system will load the CD and
begin play after a short pause. The disc number and track number will
illuminate in the display.
If a CD is already loaded into the system, press CD to enter CD mode
and select the desired CD to play.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
29
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. AUTO — SCAN:AUTO: Auto
memory tuning allows you to set
strong radio stations without loosing
your original manually set preset stations.
Press the AM or FM1/2 control to select a frequency. Press and
momentarily hold the AUTO-S control. The system will beep. When the
first six strong stations are filled, the strongest station will start playing.
Press AUTO-S to select from the stored stations. One stored station will
be selected and played each time the control is pressed. The frequency
and the channel number will be displayed.
SCAN: Scan works in radio and CD mode. Press SCAN to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band or the first ten
seconds of each track. Press SCAN again to stop.
3. Eject: Press to eject the CD
currently playing. Press CD plus the
preset number to eject a specific
CD. Press and hold to eject all CDs.
4. TUNE — MENU: Press to enter
Menu mode. Press repeatedly to
scroll through the following options:
Bass: Press the control until BASS
appears in the display. Turn the
control to increase/decrease the
level of bass.
Mid-range (if equipped): Press the control until MID appears in the
display. Turn the control to increase/decrease the level of mid-range.
Treble: Press the control until TREB appears in the display. Turn the
control to increase/decrease the level of treble.
Fade: Press the control until FADE appears in the display. Turn the
control to adjust the sound between the rear and front speakers.
Balance: Press the control until BAL appears in the display. Turn the
control to adjust the sound between the left and right speakers.
5. CLK (Clock): Press to alternate
between clock display and audio
display.
Note: If the audio operation is selected while the clock mode is on, the
selected audio mode will be displayed for ten seconds, then the display
will revert to the clock mode.
Setting the clock: Press and hold CLK for approximately two seconds
until a beep is heard. The clock’s current time will flash. Press SCAN on
30
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
the hour set control (H) to set the hours. Press AUTO-S on the minute
set control (M) to adjust the minutes. Press CLK again to disengage
clock mode.
6. FF (Fast forward): In CD
mode, press and hold to advance
through a track at high speed.
7. REW (Rewind): In CD mode,
press and hold to reverse through a
track at high speed.
8. SHUF (Shuffle): Press to play
all tracks on the current CD in
random order.
9. RPT (Repeat): Press to repeat
the current CD track. The track will
repeat continuously until RPT is
pressed again.
: Press to skip forward
10. DISC
to the beginning of the next CD.
: Press to skip back to
11. DISC
the beginning of the previous CD.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold
a preset button until sound returns.
13. Volume/ON/OFF: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
the level of volume.
14. LOAD: The load feature allows
you to load up to six single CDs into
the audio system. Press LOAD. “In”
will appear in the display when the system is ready. Insert the CD.
Autoload: To load up to six CDs into the system: Press and hold LOAD
until a beep is heard. When “In” is displayed, insert the desired CD.
When “In” is displayed again, insert the next CD. Continue until all six
are loaded (if desired).
31
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
15. SEEK — TRACK: In radio
)
mode, press to find the next (
or previous (
) listenable station
on the frequency band.
In CD mode, press to listen the next (
16. CD door: Insert CDs label side
up.
) or previous (
) track.
17. FM 1/2: Press to enter FM
mode. Press to toggle between FM1
and FM2.
18. AM: Press to enter AM mode.
SATELLITE COMPATIBLE AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH SINGLE
CD/MP3 RADIO — LATE AVAILABILITY (IF EQUIPPED)
1. SEEK: Press and release
/
for previous/next
SEEK
strong station or track.
32
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album
text (AL) may be viewed while
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the
message display, its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text
fields. The display will scroll through all of the text in the current field
before changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3
seconds of the previous press to proceed to the next/last text display.
The last text field shown on the display will become the new display
message default.
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions
are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit
only available in the continental United States.
3. AUX: This control is not
operational.
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to
playing media
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance, Fade and other menu
selections.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
left/right speakers.
33
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Fade: Press FADE; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to
access AUTOSET, Speed sensitive
volume and Setting the clock.
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL
to toggle ON/OFF. Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations
without losing your original manually set preset stations for
AM/FM1/FM2. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station
stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong
stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Speed sensitive volume: Press MENU until SPEED VOL X appears in
) or decrease (
) the
the display. Then press SEL to increase (
volume setting. The level will appear in the display.
Radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0
turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT
) or decrease
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
(
Folder/Track mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are
accessible) MODE.
10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track.
11. SHUFFLE: Press to play the
CD/MP3 tracks on the current disc
in random order.
: Press to access
12. FOLDER
the next MP3 directory.
: Press to access
13. FOLDER
the previous MP3 directory.
34
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3
mode, press until desired selection
is reached.
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed
satellite kit only available in the continental United States.
17. BAND: Press to toggle between
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
18. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band; tune
to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
19. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
20. CD: Press to enter CD mode.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
35
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21. COMP(Compression): Brings
soft and loud CD passages together
for a more consistent listening level
when in CD mode. Press COMP to turn the feature ON/OFF.
22. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a
brief sampling of radio stations or
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.
or
to
23. CAT/Tune: Press
manually tune down/up the radio
frequency band.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed
satellite kit only available in the continental United States.
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at
www.siriusradio.com
24. CD slot: Insert a CD with the label side up.
36
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM SATELLITE COMPATIBLE AM/FM
STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD/MP3 — LATE AVAILABILITY
(IF EQUIPPED)
1
23
VOL-PUSH ON
2
DISC
EJ
3
22
MUTE
21
20
19
18
17
4
BAND
TAPE
1-2
EJ
DOLBY B NR
CD
AUX
5
MENU
6
SEEK
TUNE
CAT
SCAN
REW
FF
1
2
16
BASS
TREB
FOLDER
3
15 14 13
TEXT
SEL
FOLDER
4
BAL
FADE
SHUFFLE
REPEAT
5
6
12 11 10
9
7
8
1. CD slot: Insert a CD with the
label side up.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
37
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
2. CD Eject: Press to eject a CD.
The radio will resume playing.
3. Mute: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to the
playing media.
4. Tape Eject: Press to eject the
cassette. The radio will resume
playing.
5. Tape 1–2/CD: Press to begin
tape play. If a cassette is already
playing, press to change playing
sides.
CD: If a CD is loaded in the radio,
pressing CD will cause the CD to
begin playing.
6. AUX: Press to toggle between the
current playing media and DVD (if
equipped).
7. MENU: Press to access the
following functions:
Clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTE is
SEL
to decrease/ increase hours or minutes.
displayed. Press
Compression: In CD mode, press to bring soft and loud passages
together for a more consistent listening level. Press MENU until
COMPRESS is displayed. Use SEL to toggle on/off.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume changes automatically and
slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 is
the maximum setting. Press MENU until SPEED VOL X appears in the
display. Then press SEL to increase/decrease the volume setting. The
level will appear in the display.
38
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Dolby: In tape mode, press MENU until DOLBY B XX appears in the
display. Press SEL to toggle ON/OFF.
The Dolby威 noise reduction system is manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby威 and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Folder/Track Mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disk are
accessible) MODE.
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL
to toggle on/off. Allows you to set the strongest local stations without
losing your original memory preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. When the
six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin
playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system will store
the last one in the remaining presets.
8. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track. Press to
show repeat status. Press again to
toggle status.
9. Balance: Press BAL; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
/
to shift sound to the
SEL
rear/front speakers.
10. SHUFFLE: In CD/MP3 mode,
press to play tracks in random
order. Press to show shuffle status.
Press again to toggle status.
11. TEXT/SEL: The filename, song
title, artist text or album text may
be viewed while playing an MP3
selection. Press TEXT to scroll through the text fields. The display will
scroll through all of the text in the current field before changing to the
next field. (TEXT must be pressed within three seconds of the previous
39
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
button press to proceed to the next/last text display. ) The last text field
shown on the display will become the new display message default.
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions
are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit
only available in the continental United States.
Select: Use with Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade and other menu selections.
: Press to access
12. FOLDER
the next MP3 directory folder.
: Press to access
13. FOLDER
the previous MP3 directory folder.
14. Bass: Press BASS; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
/
to decrease/increase
SEL
the treble output.
15. Fast Forward (FF): In CD
mode, press and hold to fast
forward. In tape mode, press to
activate fast forward. Press FF again
to return to play.
16. Rewind (REW): In CD mode,
press and hold to reverse CD. In
tape mode, press to rewind. Press
REW again to return to play.
FF
2
REW
1
17. Memory preset buttons: To set a station: Press BAND to select the
frequency band (AM/FM1/FM2) tune to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
40
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
18. Scan: Press to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable stations,
tape selections or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
19. Tune/CAT: TUNE: Works in
radio mode only. Press
TUNE
/
to change frequency
down/up.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed
satellite kit only available in the continental United States.
20. Seek: Press and release
SEEK
/
for previous/next
strong station, tape selection or CD
track.
21. BAND: Press to toggle through
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.
22. Cassette door: Insert the cassette with the opening to the right.
23. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase/decrease
volume.
ACCESSORY DELAY
With accessory delay, the window switches, moon roof (if equipped) and
audio system may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch
is turn to the OFF position or until any door is opened.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
41
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
42
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Entertainment Systems
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
43
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
3. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
44
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument
panel vents only.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. The
air conditioner will automatically turn on to dehumidify the air.
3. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the O (OFF) or MAX A/C position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or O (OFF) when the vehicle is parked. This allows the
vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
45
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Climate Controls
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select A/C.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to 4.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located
on the instrument panel. Press to
clear the rear window of thin ice
and fog. The small LED will
illuminate when activated.
Ensure that the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position in order to operate
the rear window defroster.
The defroster turns off automatically after 15 minutes or when the
ignition is turned to the 1 (LOCK) position. To manually turn off the
defroster before 15 minutes have passed, push the control a second time.
46
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
to turn on the
first position
parking lamps. Rotate to the second
to also turn on the
position
headlamps.
Headlamp battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the exterior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition switch has been turned off if the headlamp control is in
position. The system will not shut off the parking lamps if the
the
position.
headlamp control is in the
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system sets the
headlamps to turn on and off
automatically. The autolamp control,
located on the headlamp switch,
will:
• turn on the lamps automatically
at night
• turn off the lamps automatically
during the daylight
• keep the lamps on for up to three minutes after the key is turned to
OFF.
See Autolamp delay system (if equipped) to set the auto headlamp off
delay time.
Autolamp delay system (if equipped)
If your vehicle has an autolamp delay feature, you can set the delay time
to keep the headlights on for up to three minutes after the key is turned
OFF. The delay time is set to 20 seconds at the factory, but the delay
time may be changed by following the steps below (Steps 1 through 6
must be done within 10 seconds):
47
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
1. Turn the key to the 1 (LOCK)
position.
2. Rotate the headlamp control to
the autolamp position.
3. Rotate the headlamp control to
the OFF position.
4. Turn the key to the 3 (RUN)
position.
5. Turn the key back to the 1
(LOCK) position.
6. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position (the headlights
should turn on).
7. Turn the headlamp control to the OFF position when the desired
delay time (up to 3 minutes) has been reached.
Foglamp control (if equipped)
Press the foglamp control, located
on the instrument panel, to activate
the foglamps. The foglamp indicator
will illuminate when the foglamps
are on. Press the foglamp control to
deactivate the foglamps.
The foglamps will only operate with
the parking lamps or headlamps on.
When the highbeams are activated, the foglamps will not operate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the lowbeam headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the 3 (RUN) position.
• the headlamp control must be in the OFF, parking lamps or autolamp
position.
• the parking brake must be released.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
48
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Smart park lamps (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the DRL and autolamp features, your
park lamps will turn on automatically when lighting conditions are dark
and DRLs are activated (the headlamp control is in the OFF position).
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel.
• Push and hold top of control to
brighten.
49
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
• Push and hold bottom of control
to dim.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by a qualified service technician.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well). The center of the lamp is
marked by a 3.0 mm circle on the headlamp lens.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover the left-hand headlamp with an opaque cloth.
50
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge of high
intensity light towards the right. If
this edge is not at the horizontal
reference line, the beam will need to
be adjusted.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
the headlamp, then use a 4 mm
socket to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise (to adjust down)
or clockwise (to adjust up) aligning
the upper edge of the light pattern
to the horizontal line.
6. Move the opaque cloth to cover
the right-hand headlamp and repeat
Steps 4 and 5 for the left-hand
headlamp.
7. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps and map lamps
The front dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and
passenger seats.
51
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
The dome lamp control has three
positions:
• OFF: In this position, the lamp
will not illuminate.
• DOOR: In this position, the dome
lamp will illuminate only when a
door is opened and will remain
illuminated for 25 seconds after the door is shut.
• ON: In this position, the lamp will remain illuminated.
The map lamp controls (without
moon roof) are located on the dome
lamp. Press the button on either
side of each map lamp to illuminate
the lamps. Push the button again to
turn off the lamps.
For models equipped with a moon
roof, the map lamps are located on
the moon roof control panel. Press
the button on either side of each
map lamp to illuminate the lamps.
Push the button again to turn off
the lamps.
The map lamps will illuminate
whenever a door is opened. After
the door is shut, the lamps will remain illuminated for 25 seconds.
Cargo and dome lamp
Rear cargo lamp equipped with an
ON/OFF/DOOR control will light
when:
• the doors are closed and the
control is in the ON position.
• the control is in the DOOR
position and any door is open.
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you
open the doors.
52
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Interior lighting battery saver
The dome and/or cargo lamps will automatically extinguish after 10
minutes when the ignition key is OFF, a door has been left open and the
dome and/or cargo lamp controls are in the DOOR position. Otherwise,
interior lamps including the dome and/or cargo lamps will automatically
extinguish after 30 minutes when the ignition key is OFF.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for
Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade number
Park/turn lamps (front)
2
3157 AK (amber)
Headlamps (low beams)
2
H11
Headlamps (high beams)
2
H7
Rear stop/tail/sidemarker
2
3157K
Rear turn lamps
2
3156K
Backup lamp
2
3156K
Foglamp (front)
2
H10
Center High-mount stop lamp
5
W5W
Rear license plate lamp
2
W5W
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer.
53
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
2. Press down on the wire retainer
to release it and access the back of
the headlamp assembly.
Lowbeam bulb replacement
3. Locate the outboard most bulb,
turn it a 1⁄4 turn to the outside of
the vehicle and pull the bulb socket
straight out to remove the bulb.
54
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Highbeam bulb replacement
4. Locate the bulb that is the most
center in the vehicle and remove
the electrical connector by pulling it
straight off.
5. Loosen the retainer clip by
squeezing the top of it while pulling
it away from the bulb socket.
6. Without turning, carefully pull
bulb out of headlamp assembly.
Handle a halogen headlamp
bulb carefully and keep out
of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its metal base and do not
touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the
headlamps are operated.
Note: The bulb’s metal base gets very hot during headlamp operation.
Be sure the bulb base is cool before handling.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.
55
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
Replacing brake/tail/turn/backup lamp bulbs
The brake/tail/turn/backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp
assembly, one just below the other. Follow the same steps to replace
either bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
2. Remove the two screws from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly by pulling it rearward to
disengage snap features on the
outward side of the lamp.
4. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
6. To complete installation, follow
the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then pry
the license plate lamp assembly
(located above the license plate)
from the liftgate.
2. Remove bulb socket from lamp
assembly by turning
counterclockwise.
56
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Lights
3. Pull the bulb out from the socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly turning it clockwise.
5. To install, press the lamp assembly into liftgate.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
To remove the lamp assembly:
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
liftgate.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the
lamp assembly by depressing the
snaps.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
To complete installation, follow the
removal procedure in reverse order.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician.
Replacing foglamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician.
57
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: For intermittent
operation, move control down one
position.
Adjust the rotary control to the
desired speed setting.
For normal or low speed wiper
operation, move control down two
positions from OFF.
For high speed wiper operation,
move control down three positions
from OFF.
Mist function: To activate mist,
push control up from the OFF
position and release to get one wipe.
Windshield washer: To activate
the windshield washer, pull control
toward you. Release control to stop
washer fluid spray.
58
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For intermittent operation of rear
wiper, rotate end of control upward
position.
to the
For normal speed rear wiper
operation, rotate control upward to
ON.
To activate the rear washer, rotate
position and
the control to the
release.
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
away from the glass. Turn the blade
at a right angle to the arm. Push the
lock tab (A) to release the blade
from the arm loop and pull the
blade down toward the windshield
to remove it from the arm.
2. Attach the new blade to the arm
loop and pull it into place until a
click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can sometimes be improved by cleaning the wiper
blades, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.
59
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull down the steering column tilt
lever.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Push the steering column tilt
lever up. This will lock the steering
wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the release on the door to
open the storage compartment.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.
60
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped)
The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of
aftermarket garage door openers:
• Remove the VELCRO威 pad (2)
from the storage compartment
door (3).
• Place VELCRO威 (5) on
aftermarket transmitter (6)
opposite of actuator control (8).
• Measure the thickness (4) of the
aftermarket transmitter (6).
• Remove the rubber actuator (1)
from the storage compartment
(7) by pulling the rubber actuator
(1) forward and twisting at the
same time.
Note: The length of the rubber
actuator (1) is critical. Use care
in cutting it to length. If the rubber
actuator (1) is cut too much the
aftermarket transmitter (6) will not
activate the garage door opener. If
the rubber actuator (1) is cut too
long, the storage compartment door (3) will not close properly.
Excessive force to close the storage compartment door (3) may cause
the door latch to break.
• Per the table below, cut the rubber actuator (1) to the proper length
based on the thickness (4) measured in the third step.
Approximate Thickness of Transmitter (GDO)
Cut to Bottom of
inches
mm
Notch
Less Than
1/4
6.35
No Cut
7/8
22.00
Notch 2
1.0
26.00
Notch 4
1–3/16
32.00
Notch 6
61
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Reinstall the rubber actuator (1) in the storage compartment (7) by
twisting and pushing it back into the slot.
• Install the transmitter (6) on to storage compartment door (3)
aligning the actuator control (8) with the rubber actuator (1). Close
the storage compartment door (3) to verify proper fit. Do not force
the storage compartment door (3) or you may break the door latch. If
the rubber actuator (1) is the proper length the storage compartment
door will close. Press the storage compartment door (3) to activate
the transmitter (6).
Illuminated visor mirror (if equipped)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
in the floor console. Cigarette lighter
(if equipped) is located in the
instrument panel.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
62
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
Note: The window switches will not
illuminate when the window lock
control is in the LOCKED position.
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
AUTO and release quickly. Press
again to stop.
63
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Window lock (if equipped)
The window lock feature disables all
the power windows except the
driver’s.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s window press
the right side of the control.
Note: The window switches will not illuminate when the window control
is in the LOCKED position.
Press the left side to restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches, moon roof (if equipped) and
audio system may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position or until any door is opened.
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control, located on the
instrument panel left of the steering
wheel, clockwise to adjust the right
mirror and rotate the control
counterclockwise to adjust the left
mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
64
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause
damage to the glass and mirrors.
Automatic dimming rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming feature. When the
auto-dimming mirror is turned on,
as indicated by an illuminated green
LED to the left of the button on
mirror, it will detect bright lights
(glare) from behind the vehicle, and will change from the normal, high
reflective state, to the darkened state to minimize glare.
When the auto-dimming mirror is turned on, it will automatically return
to the normal, high reflective, state whenever the vehicle is placed in R
(Reverse) to ensure a clear view while backing up.
Do not block the sensor located to the right of the mirror button or the
sensor located on the back side of the mirror as this may impair mirror
performance.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
65
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET ACC control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
ON
OFF
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
light on the
5. The indicator
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RSM control and release
it. This will automatically return the
vehicle to the previously set speed.
The RSM control will not work if the
vehicle speed is not faster than 30
mph (48 km/h).
66
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
RSM
SET
ACC
CST
Driver Controls
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
RSM SET
ACC
• Press and hold the SET ACC
control until you get to the
CST
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the SET
ACC control to operate the
Tap-Up function. Press and
release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts
by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACC control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
RSM SET
ACC
• Press and hold the CST control
until you get to the desired
CST
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the CST control
to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
RSM SET
ACC
press the SET ACC control.
CST
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will
not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed.
67
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
ON
OFF
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Power point
2. Cupholders
3. Utility compartment
4. Ash cup (if equipped)
Use only soft cups in the
cupholders. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Cell phone use
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
68
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
To operate the moon roof:
• The moon roof is equipped with
an automatic, one-touch, express
opening feature. Press and
release the rear portion of the
control. To stop motion at any
time during the one-touch
opening, press the control a
second time.
• To close, press and hold the front portion of the control.
To operate the moon roof vent position:
• To open, press and hold the front portion of the control. This will
open the vent.
• To close, press and hold the rear portion of the control.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the moon roof needs to be opened to the vent position to reset
the moon roof positions.
If you open and close the moon roof repeatedly, the moon roof motor
may overheat and shut down for 45 seconds while the motor cools.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message
center for a display of status preceded by a brief indicator chime. The
system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of
system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.
69
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Selectable features
Set
This button is used to select and
reset various functions shown in the
INFO Menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance to Empty
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy
• Units (English/Metric)
• Language
• System Check
• INFO Display on/off
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100
km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 8 km (5 miles) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
70
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the SET control after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu will give you an
estimate of how far you can drive
with the fuel remaining in your tank
under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling your vehicle. Otherwise, the display will not show the
addition of fuel for a few kilometers (miles).
The DTE function will display “LOW FUEL LEVEL” and sound a tone for
one second when you have low fuel level indicated on the fuel gauge.
Instantaneous fuel economy
Press INFO until the menu displays
“INSTANT ECON”. This will display
your fuel economy as a Bar Graph
ranging from “L” poor economy to
“H” excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to
calculate instantaneous fuel economy. When your vehicle is not moving,
this function shows “L”, one or no bars illuminated. Instantaneous fuel
economy cannot be reset.
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
INFO menu for the current units to
be displayed.
2. Press the SET control to change
from English to Metric.
71
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
System check
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either
an OK message or a warning
message for three seconds.
Pressing the SET control cycles the message center through each of the
systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report is as follows:
1. Oil Change Reminder
2. Charging System
3. Emission Status
4. Brake System
5. Liftgate Status
6. Exterior Lamps
7. 4 Wheel Drive
8. Fuel Level Status
Language
1. Select this function from the
INFO menu for the current language
to be displayed.
2. Pressing the SET control cycles
the message center through each of
the language choices.
72
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Press and hold the SET control
for 2 seconds to set the language
choice.
Display Off
Select this function from the INFO control to turn your message center
display OFF.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
SET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
High engine temperature
Driver door ajar
Passenger door ajar
Rear left door ajar
Rear right door ajar
Park brake on
Warning cannot be reset
Warning returns after 10 minutes
73
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Liftgate ajar
Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from OFF to ON.
Service emission sys
Check fuel cap
Low brake fluid
Service brake system
Check left headlamp
Check right headlamp
Check left high beam
Check right high beam
Check left turn lamps
Check right turn lamps
Engine change oil soon
Engine oil change now
Low fuel
Service 4WD
Turn signal on
4WD locked temporarily (if
Temporary alert
equipped)
4WD disabled temporarily (if
equipped)
4WD auto restored (if
equipped)
HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer to
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as soon as
possible.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the passenger door is not
completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR. Displayed when the rear right door is not
completely closed.
74
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
LIFTGATE AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate or liftgate glass is not
completely closed. Press SET to reset display.
PARK BRAKE ON. Displayed when the park brake is on. If the warning
stays on after the park brake is off, contact your dealer as soon as
possible.
SERVICE EMISSION SYS. Displayed when the engine has defaulted to
a ’limp-home’ operation. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM. Displayed when the braking system is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HEADLAMPS. Displayed when the
headlamps are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps
as soon as possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. Refer to
Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT HIGH BEAMS. Displayed when the
headlamps are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps
as soon as possible and have the burned out lamp replaced. Refer to
Replacing headlamp bulbs in the Lights chapter.
CHECK LEFT OR RIGHT TURN LAMPS. Displayed when the turn
signals are activated and at least one is burned out. Check the lamps as
soon as safely possible and have the burned out lamp replaced.
LOW FUEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.
SERVICE 4WD. Displayed when the 4X4 is not operating properly. If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as
soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL ON. Displayed when the turn signal is activated and the
vehicle is driven more that 0.8 km (1/2 mile).
4WD LOCKED TEMPORARILY (if equipped). Displayed when the
4X4 is temporarily locked. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.
4WD DISABLED TEMPORARILY (if equipped). Displayed when the
4X4 is temporarily disabled. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your dealer as soon as possible.
4WD AUTO RESTORED (if equipped). Displayed when the 4X4 is
restored to normal operations.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON/ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW.
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 5% or less. When oil life
75
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
left is between 5% and 0%, the ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message
will be displayed. When oil life left reaches 0%, the ENGINE OIL
CHANGE NOW message will be displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
[approximately 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 12 months] perform the
following:
1. Press the SET control to access
the system check function.
2. Press and release the SET control
to display “OIL CHNG XXX% HOLD
SET NEW”.
3. Press and hold the SET control
for 2 seconds to display “OIL
CHANGE SET TO 100%”.
INFO UNAVAIL. These messages indicate improper operation of the
vehicle network communication systems for the following vehicle
modules.
• Fuel computer
• Charging system
• Door sensor
• Brakes
• Exterior lamps
• Emissions system
• 4WD info
Contact your Ford Dealer as soon as possible if these messages occur on
a regular basis.
76
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
LIFTGATE
To open the rear window, pull the
right side of the liftgate handle.
To open the liftgate, pull the left
side of the liftgate handle.
• Do not open the liftgate or
liftgate glass in a garage or other
enclosed area with a low ceiling.
If the liftgate glass is raised and
the liftgate is also opened, both
liftgate and glass could be
damaged against a low ceiling.
• Do not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so
could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well
as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
Make sure that the liftgate door and/or window are closed to
prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide which can injure your lungs
and cause drowsiness and even death. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate door or window open, keep the vents open so outside air comes
into the vehicle.
CARGO SHADE (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle has a cargo shade, you can use it to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the shade:
• Insert the ends of the cargo
shade into the mounting features
located behind the rear seat on
the rear trim panels.
To operate the shade:
1. Grasp the handle at the rear edge
of the shade and pull rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support
rod into the retention slots located
on the rear quarter trim panels.
77
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Ensure that the posts are properly latched in mounting features.
The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is
not securely installed.
Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of vehicle in the case of
a sudden stop or collision.
Cargo management system (if equipped)
The cargo management system consists of a storage compartment
located in the floor of the rear cargo area.
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid. The lid can be removed
to allow for extra storage.
2. To close, lower the lid and push
handle until latch clicks.
LUGGAGE RACK
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
roof rack. The maximum load for
the roof rack is 100 lbs (44 kg),
evenly distributed on the cross-bars.
If it is not possible to evenly
distribute the load, position it in the
center or as far forward on the
cross-bars as possible.
Do not use the vehicle’s door
handles as tie down loops.
78
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To adjust the cross-bar (if equipped) position:
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the desired
location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar.
To remove the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) from the roof rack
side rails:
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the end of
the rail.
3. Use a long, flat object to depress
the tongue in the endcaps on both
sides of the cross-bar.
4. Slide the cross-bar assembly off
the end of the rail.
79
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To reinstall the cross-bar assembly (if equipped) to the roof rack
side rails:
1. Ensure that both cross-bar
assemblies are installed with the F
(front) arrow facing towards the
front of the vehicle.
2. Use a long, flat object to depress
the tongue in the endcaps on both
sides of the cross-bar.
3. Slide the cross-bar assemblies
over the end cap tongue and into
the side rails.
4. Tighten thumbwheel at both ends
of the cross-bar.
80
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
NO BOUNDARIES RACK SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an optional roof rack. This unique
feature allows you to carry cargo on
an inner roof rack as well as on the
conventional roof rack. The
maximum load for the conventional
roof rack is 100 lbs (45 kg). The
inner rack can also hold 100 lbs (45
kg) if in the down and locked
position. The combined load for
both the conventional fixed rack and
the sliding portion attached to the rear bumper should not exceed 100
lbs (45 kg). Distribute the loads as evenly as possible on both the roof
and inner rack, when extended or stowed. Always secure loads by using
the tie down loops or rack accessories available from your local Ford
Dealership.
To extend the inner rack:
1. Rotate the handle on the lift bar
of the inner rack in the direction of
the arrows on the handle.
2. Lift the bar straight up (about
two inches).
81
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
3. Slide the inner rack rearward,
with an initial pull to release the
rack from its stowed position, until
it has completely extended and
stops.
4. Lower the inner rack by pivoting
at the hinges of the rack.
Do not pivot the inner rack
downward until it has been
completely extended. Failure to
fully extend the inner rack could
result in improper positioning of
the rack and possible damage to
your vehicle.
5. Insert the feet into the receivers
on the bumper. Push the rack into
the bumper until the feet click into
place.
82
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
6. Figure shows foot (A) clicked
into place correctly.
7. With the locking tab (B)
exposed on the foot, this figure
shows the rack is not installed
correctly. Repeat steps 3 through
5 and secure the rack before
loading cargo.
Do not drive the vehicle if the inner roof rack is extended and
loaded with cargo but is not secured into the receivers. This can
cause dangerous driving conditions.
Do not attempt to move or store the inner rack when loaded.
This can cause personal injury and damage to your vehicle that
may not be covered by warranty.
Do not use the inner rack as a ladder. This could result in
personal injury and damage to your roof rack.
83
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
To stow the inner rack:
1. Rotate the handle on the lift bar
of the inner rack in the direction of
the arrows on the handle and pull
the inner rack away from the
bumper.
2. Lift the inner rack (pivoting at
the hinges).
3. Continue lifting the inner rack
until it is parallel with the roof.
4. Slide the rack forward onto the
roof, pushing the rack into its final
stowed position.
84
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
5. Lift the feet over the side rails and lock them into place.
6. Ensure both feet are locked and secured into place.
To adjust the cross-bar assembly on the inner rack:
1. Loosen the screws on the
cross-bar with a T-25 Torx driver.
2. Move the cross-bar to the desired
location, keeping the cross-bar
parallel with the upper bar.
3. Tighten the screws with the T-25
Torx driver.
4. Ensure that the cross-bar is
tightened and secured into place
before attempting to load cargo.
Loading cargo:
Only load cargo in the approved
area (1). Do not load cargo outside
of the designated area (2).
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible. Always use tie downs to
secure the load.
85
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driver Controls
Always stow the inner rack on the roof when using an automated
car wash.
Do not attempt to open the liftgate or rear window when the rack
is in the down position. This may damage the rack or your
vehicle.
To ensure proper sliding function of your rack, keep the rack
clear of debris. If debris is visible inside the roof c-channels or
side rails, spray the items clear with a water hose.
Do not load large or bulky items (i.e., plywood, mattresses) on
the rear of the vehicle so that they extend above the roof line. In
addition to blocking your rear view, they can also cause dangerous
driving situations and could result in an increase risk of loss of vehicle
control and personal injury. Use additional care when driving with
reduced visibility.
Only load cargo in the designated area. Loading outside of the
approved area could result in personal injury as well as vehicle
damage that may not be covered by warranty.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sport cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increase risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
86
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
KEYS
One key operates all the locks and starts the vehicle. Always carry a
spare key with you in case of an emergency.
Your keys are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied
keys, replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.
Refer to the SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system section later in this
chapter for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock controls are
located on the driver and front
passenger door panels.
will unlock all the
Pressing the
doors. Pressing the
will lock all
the doors.
Power door lock/unlock inhibit feature
As a theft deterrent, the power door lock controls can be disabled 20
seconds after the ignition has been turned to the 1 (LOCK) position and
the vehicle is locked using the remote entry transmitter or the key in the
door lock cylinder. The door lock controls are enabled when the vehicle
on
is unlocked using the key in the door lock cylinder or by pressing
the remote entry transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off using
the following procedure:
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position and all
vehicle doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds
or the procedure will have to be repeated.
1. Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (RUN) position. The horn will chirp
one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. Press the power door lock control on the door panel two times within
five seconds. The horn will chirp two times to confirm the feature is off; the
horn will chirp two times and honk one time to confirm the feature is on.
87
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
7. Turn the ignition from the 3 (RUN) position to the 1 (LOCK) position.
The horn will chirp one time to confirm the programming mode has been
exited.
Repeat the procedure to turn the feature on or off.
Door key unlocking/locking
Two step door unlocking
1. Turn the key in the door cylinder to unlock the driver’s door. Note:
The interior lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is
in the DOOR position and the perimeter alarm system (if equipped) will
deactivate. For more information, refer to Illuminated entry later in this
chapter.
2. Turn the key in the door cylinder again within three seconds to unlock
the passenger doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, turn the key in the
door cylinder once to unlock all of the doors , the liftgate and liftgate
glass. Note: The interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated
entry feature later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is
in the DOOR position. For information on switching from two step to one
step door unlocking, refer to Switching from two step to one step door
unlocking later in this chapter.
Locking the doors
Turn the key in the door cylinder to lock all the doors. The park/turn
lamps will flash once and the perimeter alarm (if equipped) will start the
arming process. For more information concerning the perimeter alarm,
refer to Perimeter alarm system (if equipped) later in this chapter.
If any of the doors, the liftgate or the hood are not properly closed the
park/turn lamps will not flash.
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out
of the vehicle. With the key in any ignition position, the driver’s door will
automatically unlock if it is locked using the power lock control on the
driver’s door panel while the driver’s door is open.
88
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Childproof door locks
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Rotate lock control in the
direction of arrow to engage the
lock.
• Rotate control in the opposite
direction to disengage childproof
locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle,
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle, or
89
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
• weak or dead transmitter battery.
The remote entry system allows you
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key. The remote locking
and unlocking features will operate
independent of the ignition position;
however, the panic feature will only
operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACCESSORY)
position.
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the dealership in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is in the DOOR
position and the perimeter alarm system (if equipped) will deactivate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press
and release
once to unlock all of the doors, the liftgate and liftgate glass. Note: The
interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry feature
later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is in the DOOR
position and the perimeter alarm system (if equipped) will deactivate.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door
unlocking by pressing and holding both
and
buttons
simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately 4
seconds. The parklamps will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has
switched to one step unlocking. Repeat the procedure to switch back to
two step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. Assuming all vehicle doors
and the liftgate are properly closed, the park/turn lamps will flash once
90
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
and the perimeter alarm (if equipped) will start the arming process. For
more information concerning the perimeter alarm, refer to Perimeter
alarm system (if equipped) later in this chapter.
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
2. Press
doors and liftgate are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again
and the horn will chirp once.
If any of the doors or the hood are not properly closed, the horn will
control is
chirp twice and park/turn lamps will not flash when the
pressed.
Sounding a panic alarm
to activate the alarm. To deactivate the feature, press the
Press
control again, turn the ignition to the 3 (RUN) or 4 (START) position, or
wait for the alarm to time out in approximately 3 minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(LOCK) or 2 (ACCESSORY) position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
91
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure. Note: If all remote entry
transmitters are not present during the programming procedure, the
missing transmitters will not work with the vehicle following
programming.
92
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 1 (LOCK)
position to 3 (RUN).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
10 seconds) between the 1 (LOCK)
position and 3 (RUN). Note: The
eighth turn must end in the 3 (RUN) position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
9. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 2 (ACCESSORY) position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the doors are locked by key in the door cylinder, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
93
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Illuminated exit
• The interior lights will illuminate when the key is removed from the
ignition.
The lamps automatically turn off after 25 seconds. The dome and cargo
lamp controls must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated
exit system to operate.
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to
your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to
Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded
key.
Note: The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is located in the
instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is in the 1 (LOCK) position, the theft indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock娂 system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position, the theft indicator will
glow for 3 seconds, then turn off to indicate normal system
functionality.
94
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (RUN) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 2
(ACCESSORY) position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (RUN) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
• The theft indicator will illuminate
for three seconds and then go
out.
• If the theft indicator stays on for
an extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system
serviced by your dealer.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to a dealership. The key codes
need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
95
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
Programming spare keys
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle.
Tips:
• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
• Only use SecuriLock娂 keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1
(LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN)
position. Keep the ignition in the 3
(RUN) position for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10
seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds, but
no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (LOCK) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 (LOCK)
position and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the
new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (LOCK) position to the 3 (RUN) position.
Keep the ignition in the 3 (RUN) position for at least three seconds but
not more than 10 seconds.
96
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off; you
may need to repeat Steps 1 through 5. If failure repeats, bring your
vehicle to your dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait twenty seconds
and then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership to
aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
park/turn lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
ignition. Any of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
• Press the
control on the remote entry transmitter.
• Lock the doors with the key in the key cylinder.
• Open the driver’s door and press the power door lock control to lock
all the doors, and then close the door.
Note: The doors, liftgate and hood will arm individually, and if any of
them are open, they must be closed in order to be armed.
When you lock the vehicle using any of the methods above:
• the park/turn lamps will flash once to indicate the hood, each door
and the liftgate are closed.
• the park/turn lamps will not flash if the hood, any door or the liftgate
are open. Once all doors, hood and liftgate are closed, the park/turn
lamps will flash to confirm the alarm will be set.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is set after a 20–second arming
period.
97
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks and Security
When you press the
control on the remote entry transmitter twice
within three seconds, the horn will chirp once to confirm the doors,
liftgate and hood are closed and locked, and the alarm is set.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
control on your remote entry
• Unlock the doors by pressing the
transmitter.
• Unlock the doors with a key. Turn the key full travel (toward the front
of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.
• Turning the key in the ignition to the 3 (RUN) or 4 (START) position.
Note: The key must be a valid, programmed, coded key.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if any door, liftgate or the hood is
opened without using the key or the remote entry transmitter.
To deactivate the triggered alarm state:
control on your remote entry
• Unlock the doors by pressing the
transmitter.
• Unlock the doors with a key. Turn the key full travel (toward the front
of the vehicle) to ensure the alarm disarms.
on the remote entry transmitter to disable the alarm; the
• Press
alarm will be disabled, but the vehicle will remain in an armed state.
• Turning the key in the ignition to the 3 (RUN) or 4 (START) position.
Note: The key must be a valid, programmed, coded key.
98
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
FRONT SEATS
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Adjustable head restraints
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push side control and push down on
head restraint to lower it.
99
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Adjusting the front manual seat
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
100
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the control located on the
seat to activate.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seats will activate when the ignition is in the RUN position.
When activated, they will turn off automatically after 10 minutes or when
the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
Rear seats
Head restraints
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
101
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The head restraints can be moved
up and down. Lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly or as
close as possible behind your head.
Push control to lower or remove
head restraint.
Folding down rear seats
1. Raise the rear seat head restraint
and remove.
2. Place the head restraint under
the front seat for storage.
102
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Pull the seat release control.
Note: Make sure the floor is clear of all objects before folding the seat.
4. Flip seat forward.
Attach the safety belt web snap
button to the quarter trim panel
snap button. This will ensure that
safety belt does not get caught by
staying out of the seat back folding
path.
103
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To release seatback, pull the
seatback release lever (on top of
seat) toward the front seat. This is
common for both 60% and 40%
seatbacks.
Note: When the seatback release
lever is pulled, slowly lower
seatback to the flat position.
6. Rotate seatback down into load
floor position.
Returning the rear seats to upright position
1. Pull seatback up and into upright
position making sure seatback locks
into place and the red seat
unlatched indicator on release
paddle is not visible.
104
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Rotate seat cushion down into the
seating position making sure that
the seat cushion is locked into place
and that the safety belt buckles are
exposed.
Make sure safety belt buckle
heads are through elastic
holders on seat backs. Safety belt
buckles may break if they are
trapped underneath the seatback
as the seatback is rotated down.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
3. Remove the head restraint stored
under the front seat and return it to
the original position on the seat
back.
105
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the rear cushion
1. Lift the yellow tab to release the
hinges.
2. Pull the cushion to the outboard
side of the vehicle.
To install the rear cushion
1. Push the cushion to the inboard
side of the vehicle.
2. Make sure that the hinges are
locked into place.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System姟
The Personal Safety System娂 provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System娂 consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors.
• Front passenger sensing system
106
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
•
•
•
•
Front crash severity sensor.
Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, passenger occupant classification sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System姟 work?
The Personal Safety System娂 can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System娂 determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal, and in side collisions and rollovers when the vehicle is equipped
with the Safety Canopy娂 system.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
107
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System娂 to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to
the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants in
rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting very
close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the occupant is
not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and they move
forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to reduce the
risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) when the
passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of airbag(s)
after a collision.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the airbags section
of this chapter.
108
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System娂 to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety restraints section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers when the
vehicle is equipped with the Safety Canopy娂 system. This maximizes the
effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient
severity, together with the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System姟 is operational
The Personal Safety System娂 uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System娂 is not required.
The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and passenger occupant classification sensor. In addition,
the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument
cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
109
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System娂 serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician
immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
110
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Energy Management Feature
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• The front outboard safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
111
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
All safety belts in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
The passenger safety belts have two types of locking modes described
below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat (other than a
belt-positioning booster) is installed. Children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer
to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in
this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
112
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all seating
positions (except the driver position, which doesn’t have this
feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning
properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for proper
function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace
the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
113
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze and hold the buttons on the
side and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the buttons and
pull down on the height adjuster to
make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioners activate during frontal collisions, and in
side collisions and rollovers when the vehicle is equipped with the Safety
Canopy娂 system. A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens
the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts in such a way that they fit
more snugly against the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of
a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch (20
cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
114
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1 minute and the warning
chime sounds 6 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder姟
The BeltMinder娂 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltMinder娂 feature uses information from the passenger occupant
classification sensor to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
BeltMinder娂 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the passenger occupant classification sensor.
115
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the BeltMinder娂 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder娂 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
BeltMinder娂 feature.
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
ON...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 5 km/h (3
mph) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately 1
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 5 km/h (3
mph) and more than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
to ON...
Then...
The BeltMinder娂 feature will not
activate.
The BeltMinder娂 feature is activated the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The BeltMinder娂 feature is activated the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
116
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
⬙Crashes are rare
events⬙
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The more we
drive, the more we are exposed to ⬙rare⬙ events,
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during our
lifetime.
⬙I’m not going far⬙ 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.
⬙Belts are
Ford designs its safety belts to enhance comfort. If
uncomfortable⬙
you are uncomfortable - try different positions for
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as possible; this can
improve comfort.
⬙I was in a hurry⬙ Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder娂
reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up.
⬙Seat belts don’t
Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
work⬙
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,
and by 60% in light trucks.
⬙Traffic is light⬙
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
⬙Belts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more
clothes⬙
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
unbelted.
⬙The people I’m
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
with don’t wear
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
belts⬙
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
⬙I have an airbag⬙ Airbags offer greater protection when used with
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
⬙I’d rather be
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
thrown clear⬙
times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T ⬙PICK OUR CRASH⬙.
117
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the
BeltMinder娂 chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the
risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the
BeltMinder娂 feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the BeltMinder娂 feature for that seating position, the BeltMinder娂 is
disabled for the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder娂 feature will
re-enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and
remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given
for the one time disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder姟 feature
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder娂 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder娂 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the safety
belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state. (Step 3 must be completed
within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off.)
118
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder娂 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder娂 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3
seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.
• After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a
qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
119
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
120
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame,
bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks and B-pillar
surrounding parts may affect the performance of the airbag sensors
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
121
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains a
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the airbag sensors to close
an electrical circuit that initiates
airbag inflation. The fact that the
airbags did not inflate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not sufficient
enough to cause activation. Front
airbags are designed to inflate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
122
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder or sodium compounds which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. It is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• one or more impact and safing sensors
• a readiness light and tone
• a diagnostic module
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits
and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the
impact sensors, the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the
airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors).
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again
and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
123
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s
frontal airbag under certain conditions. The front passenger
seat-mounted side airbag (if equipped) will be deactivated if the sensor
detects an empty seat; otherwise, the seat-mounted side airbag will be
enabled. The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are
designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
• A smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints,
or a small adult occupies the front passenger seat.
Even with the front passenger sensing system, children 12 and
under should be properly restrained in the back seat.
When the front passenger seat is
occupied and the sensing system
has turned off the passenger’s
frontal airbag, the ⬙passenger airbag
off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
off. When the front passenger seat is
not occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger
frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.
124
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The indicator light is located in the center stack of the instrument panel
just below the radio.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front
passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has
been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the
airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator is lit, it could be that
the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s airbag. If
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should
be advised to ride in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
125
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ light may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Light
Unlit
Unlit
Empty seat
Small (i.e. 3 ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
Lit
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, Small or
Lit
medium object with
safety belt buckled
Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
In case there is a problem with the
passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit. DO
NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to the dealer.
In case there is a problem with the passenger sensing system, the airbag
readiness light in the instrument cluster will stay lit. DO NOT attempt to
repair or service the system; take your vehicle immediately to the dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the status of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section in
the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
126
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety Canopy姟 system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy娂. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy娂 could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy娂
system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a
vehicle containing a Safety Canopy娂. See your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety
Canopy娂 system is provided.
127
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy娂.
How does the Safety Canopy姟 system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy娂 system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy娂).
The Safety Canopy娂 system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy娂 deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted at lower B-Pillar (one on each side).
• Two crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy娂 system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy娂 will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
128
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Safety Canopy娂 system is designed to active when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to initiate Safety
Canopy娂 inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy娂 is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above the first and second row seats. The Safety Canopy娂 is
designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover
events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy娂 did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy娂 is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover
likelihood.
Several Safety Canopy娂
system components get hot
after inflation. Do not touch them
after inflation.
If the Safety Canopy娂 system has deployed, the Safety
Canopy娂 will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy娂 system (including the A, B and C pillar trim)
must be inspected and serviced by a qualified technician in
accordance with the vehicle service manual. If the Safety
Canopy娂 is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side airbag is not required.
129
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Side airbag system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an airbag SRS is provided.
130
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located on the lower portion of the b-pillar (one on
each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. If the front passenger sensing system
detects an empty seat, the front passenger seat-mounted side airbag will
be deactivated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
131
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will
not function again. The side
airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by a qualified
technician in accordance with
the vehicle service manual. If
the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
132
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
133
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
134
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
135
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
136
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
lb. (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used for
children up to 60 lb. (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper
torso restraint for children up to 80 lb. (36 kg) using an upper torso
harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in the front seats.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
The rear seat head restraints must be removed when using a child
seat.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
137
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
138
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
139
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2
through 9.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seating positions of your vehicle are equipped with built-in
tether strap anchors located behind the seats on the roof panel in the
cargo area.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions:
Attach the tether strap only
to the appropriate tether
anchor as shown. The tether strap
may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct
tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, remove the head restraint
first, place under the front seat for storage, and then route the tether
strap over the top of the seatback.
140
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
There are three tether anchors
located on the headliner at the rear
of the vehicle.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
The arrow in the above graphic
points toward the front of the
vehicle.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
141
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach
the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also
be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the
following locations:
The anchors on both sides of the
center of the rear seat are provided
primarily for child seats at the
outboard seats, and are further
apart than the pairs of lower
anchors for child seat installation at
other seats. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center rear seat. A
child seat with LATCH attachments on belt webbing can be used at the
center rear seat unless a child seat at an outboard rear seat is attached
to one of these lower anchors. Install a child seat onto the lower anchors
at the center rear seat ONLY IF the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the child seat can be installed to anchors that are
spaced up to 20 in (500 mm) apart.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
142
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the second row seat
between the cushion and seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
143
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints
to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD has the ability to use all four
wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to
safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
144
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. Information on
transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the
Driving chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be
found in the Maintenance and
Specification chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
145
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
146
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
147
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the tire label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
148
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs.
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
149
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the tire label or certification label which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the tire label or certification label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the tire label or certification label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the tire label or certification label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
150
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the tire label on the B pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford
or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Important: Remember to replace the spare tire when you replace the
road tires on your vehicle. Even if it has never been used, the spare tire
should be replaced because tires degrade over time.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel air valves when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
151
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires.
T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire Information (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a T-type/mini-spare tire. This tire will
have the words ⬙Temporary Use Only⬙ molded into the tire sidewall. This
spare tire is considered ⬙temporary⬙. Replace the T-type/mini-spare with
a tire of the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the
other road tires as soon as possible.
When driving with the T-type/mini-spare tire do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the T-type/mini spare
tire
• Use more than one T-type/mini spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the T-type/mini spare tire
Use of a T-type/mini spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped)
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
152
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
Tire change procedure
When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or R
(Reverse) (manual transaxle).
153
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and place gearshift
lever in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse)
(manual transmission).
2. Set the parking brake and turn
engine off.
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
Removing the jack and tools
Non-cargo management system
(if equipped):The jack and tools
are located under the carpeted
hardboard.
Pull back the carpet away from the lift gate, and remove the hardboard
cover.
154
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Unbuckle the strap and remove the
jack and tools by pulling the right
side up first. Remove the tools from
the jack in order to remove the
spare tire from under the vehicle.
Note: For some non-cargo management system vehicles, the jack and
tools are located in the right rear of the cargo area behind an access
panel.
Cargo management system (if
equipped):The jack and tools are
located in the right rear of the cargo
area behind an access panel.
155
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
To remove jack from vehicle:
1. Release the thumbscrew on the
bracket.
2. Release the retention clip on the
upper part of the jack bracket.
3. Dislodge the jack from the
bracket and carefully guide jack
down and out through trim opening,
upper end out first.
Remove the lug wrench from the
jack in order to remove the spare
tire from under the vehicle.
Removing the spare tire or spare tire and tether (if equipped)
1. Insert the lug wrench through the
access hole in the rear bumper.
2. Turn the handle counterclockwise
and lower the spare tire until it can
be slid rearward and the cable is
slack.
3. Slide the retainer through the
center of the wheel.
156
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
If equipped with a tether, perform the following additional steps:
4. Lift the spare tire on end to
access tether attachment (1).
5. Use the lug wrench to remove the
lug nut from the spare tire tether.
6. If not replacing the spare or flat
tire to the underbody storage area,
raise winch up into the installed
position.
7. Use the attached Velcro strap (2)
to tie the tether end to the winch
actuator shaft (if equipped).
157
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Changing the flat tire
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack locations:
• Front
158
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear
9. Lower the jack from its stored
height to fit under the jacking
notches. Position the jack according
to the following guides and turn the
jack handle clockwise until the tire
is a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) off
the ground.
Never use the differentials as a
jacking point.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
10. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.
159
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
13. Remove the jack and fully
1
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
3
4
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
5
14. Cargo management system (if
equipped):
Reclip the tools onto the jack.
160
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
2
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Reinstall the jack and tools in the cargo area. To replace the jack in the
vehicle,
• guide the jack bottom first in the
trim opening and position in the
bracket (3),
• secure the retention clip on the
upper part of the jack (2), and
• close the thumbscrew (1).
Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
Non-cargo management system
(if equipped):
• Reclip the tools onto the jack
making sure that the tools are
fully contained by the clips as
shown.
• Reinstall the jack in the pocket
with the left side first, then snap
the right side down.
• Ensure that the hold-strap
contains the jack and tools before snapping the buckle.
• Ensure that the jack and tools are oriented as illustrated.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
161
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
If you are stowing a tire that requires reattaching it to the
vehicle with a tether, perform these steps first, then proceed with
the steps following.
1. Place tire on end with valve stem
facing rearward, away from vehicle.
2. Place tether into bolt holes in
wheel and attach lug nut using lug
wrench.
3. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing down. If your
vehicle is equipped with aluminum wheels, remove the wheel ornament.
4. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the center of the wheel.
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you to
overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort, take
the vehicle to your dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience. If
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer hitch, guide the tire with
one hand; keep the rear of the tire tilted down until the tire
clears the bumper.
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result
in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire. (Make sure that
the tire does not contact the bumper.)
7. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance information),
or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
162
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
N•m
M12 x 1.5
100
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of
control.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
163
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
164
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the tire label or the
safety certification label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
165
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on either the tire label or certification label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
166
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
167
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle
loading — with and without a trailer section.
168
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
“wear bars”, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread
wears down to the same height as
these “wear bars”, the tire is worn
out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any
of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
• Fabric showing through the tire
rubber
• Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
• Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
• Cracks in the tread groove
• Impact damage resulting from use
• Separation in the tread
• Separation in the sidewall
• Severe abrasion on the sidewall
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
169
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
170
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
171
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
USING SNOW TIRES AND TRACTION DEVICES
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, using snow tires or traction
devices may be necessary.
172
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices:
• SAE class “S” cables should ONLY be used on the front axle for
P235/70R16 tires. With P225/75R15 and P215/70R16 tires, SAE class
“S” cables can be used on both the front and rear wheels.
• Install cables or chains securely, verifying that the cables or chains do
not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against
the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the
cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage.
• Avoid overloading your vehicle.
• Remove the cables or chains when they are no longer needed.
• Do not use cables or chains on dry roads.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables or chains on your
vehicle.
Consult your dealer for information on other Ford approved methods of
traction control.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label and Tire Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
173
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Look
for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum payload for
the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer
installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the
equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label
in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
174
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
175
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits
could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
dealership.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
176
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label vehicle weight rating
limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
177
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for
more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
178
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
(5 x 220) – (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (5
x 99 kg) — (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 — 495 — 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x
100) = 1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (12 x 45 kg) = 635 —
198 — 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. .
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (9
x 45 kg) = 635 — 198 — 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Certification label
found on the edge of the driver’s door.
179
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow
1. Use the appropriate maximum GCWR chart (in the Trailer towing
section in this chapter) for your type of engine and rear axle ratio.
2. Weigh your vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, take your
vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks.
3. Subtract your loaded weight from the maximum GCWR in the chart.
This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow. It must be
below the maximum trailer weight shown in the chart.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transaxle,
axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to maximize
vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
180
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 800 km
(500 miles).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Certification label. For
load specification terms found on the label, refer to Vehicle loading in
this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded
vehicle when figuring the total weight.
4x2
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Maximum
Trailer Weight
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
Range - lb.
frontal area of
(kg)
(kg)
trailer - ft2
(m)2
2.3L w/manual
4860 (2204)
1500 (680)
24 (2.2)
transmission
2.3L
4940 (2241)
1500 (680)
24 (2.2 )
w/automatic
transmission
3.0L
7080 (3211 )
3500 (1588)
30 (2.8)
w/automatic
transmission
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter.
Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the
GCWR.
The Escape is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s) as
specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. The Escape vehicle electrical system is not
equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.
181
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4x4
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Maximum
Trailer Weight
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
Range - lb.
frontal area of
(kg)
(kg)
trailer - ft2
(m)2
2.3L w/manual
5040 (2286)
1500 (680)
24 (2.2)
transmission
2.3L
5100 (2313)
1500 (680 )
24 (2.2)
w/automatic
transmission
3.0L
7240 (3284 )
3500 (1588 )
30 (2.8)
w/automatic
transmission
Notes: For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation. For definitions of terms and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading in this chapter.
Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not exceed the
GCWR.
The Escape is capable of pulling the maximum trailer weight(s) as
specified above. Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. The Escape vehicle electrical system is not
equipped to accommodate electric trailer brakes.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
182
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to hook retainers on the
vehicle. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric, manual, automatic or surge-type brakes, if compatible with the
vehicle, are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
183
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission in the Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
184
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
An example of “recreational towing” is towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome.
If your vehicle is automatic transmission equipped, with a 4x2
(front-wheel drive only) configured powertrain, “recreational towing” is
permitted by trailering the vehicle with its front wheels on a dolly. This
protects the transmission’s internal mechanical components from
potential lack of lubrication damage.
If your vehicle is automatic transmission equipped, with a 4x4 (all-wheel
drive) configured powertrain, “recreational towing” is permitted only if
the vehicle is trailered with all four (4) wheels off the ground. Otherwise,
no “recreational towing” is permitted.
If your vehicle is manual transmission equipped (both 4x2 and 4x4),
shifting the transmission into neutral permits “flat-towing” (all wheels on
the ground) for pulling behind a motorhome. Your vehicle may be towed
up to a speed of 113 km/h (70 mph) but you should always obey local
speed limits.
For other towing requirements, refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
185
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. LOCK, locks the gearshift lever
and steering column and allows key
removal.
2. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. RUN, all electrical circuits
operational and warning lights will
illuminate. This is the position the
key is in when you’re driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
186
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an
automatic transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
P
R
N
D
2
1
187
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If starting a vehicle with a manual
transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Push the clutch pedal to the
floor.
3. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the
188
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
light may not illuminate.
Driving
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (RUN) without
turning the key to 4 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely. This condition may
occur when:
• the front wheels are turned
• a front wheel is against the curb
Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to 1 (LOCK), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine
still fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
189
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
!
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Under normal operating conditions, brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not
contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with
emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations
can lead to more dust than in the past. Brake dust can be cleaned by
weekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can
be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A).
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
190
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.)
ABS
!
BRAKE
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), pull
the parking brake handle up as far
as possible.
The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate and will remain
illuminated until the parking brake
is released.
!
BRAKE
To release, press and hold the button (2), pull the handle up slightly,
then push the handle down.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
191
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
STEERING
To prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. If the
steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
192
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the RUN position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the RUN position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a
fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly.
Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to LOCK, then remove the key.
2. Using a screwdriver or similar
tool, carefully pry out the small,
round, tethered Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock (BTSI) cover cap
located to the right of the gearshift
lever.
P
R
N
D
2
1
193
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
3. Insert a screwdriver or similar
tool straight down into the access
hole and press downward while
pulling the gearshift lever out of the
P (Park) position and into the N
(Neutral) position.
4. Remove tool and reinstall BTSI tethered cover cap.
5. Start the vehicle and release the parking brake.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
194
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Driving with an automatic overdrive transaxle
Your automatic overdrive transaxle
provides fully automatic operation in
either D (Overdrive) or with the
O/D OFF switch depressed. Driving
with the gearshift lever in D
(Overdrive) gives the best fuel
economy for normal driving
conditions.
For manual control, start in 1
(First) and then shift manually.
To put your vehicle in gear, start the
engine, depress the brake pedal,
then move gearshift lever out of P
(Park).
R D21
ODO
195
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transaxle
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
196
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transaxle
operates in gears one through four.
D (Overdrive) can be deactivated by
pressing the O/D OFF switch on the
side of the gearshift lever. This will
illuminate the O/D OFF light and
activate Drive.
Drive (O/D OFF switch pressed)
Drive is activated when the O/D OFF switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF light is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the O/D OFF switch. The
O/D OFF light will not be illuminated.
197
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to D (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the D
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transaxle to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of the parking
brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition
whenever you leave your vehicle. Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running. If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle
may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
198
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Using the clutch
Vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle have a starter interrupt
interlock that prevents cranking of the engine unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
When starting a vehicle with a manual transaxle, you must:
1. Put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
1
3
5
2
4
R
2. Hold down the brake pedal.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the
floor.
4. Without depressing the
accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
to position 4 (START), release the
ignition as soon as the engine starts.
5. Let the engine idle for a few
seconds.
6. Release the brake pedal, then
slowly release the clutch pedal while
pressing down slowly on the
accelerator pedal.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do
not use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while
waiting on a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life.
199
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following charts for best fuel economy:
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
1-2
14 mph
2-3
25 mph
3-4
34 mph
4-5
44 mph
(22
(40
(55
(70
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy)
1-2
12 mph (19 km/h)
2-3
19 mph (31 km/h)
3-4
29 mph (46 km/h)
4-5
38 mph (61 km/h)
Reverse
Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transaxle.
Put the gearshift lever into the
neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R
(Reverse).
1 3 5
2
4
R
Note: You can shift into R (Reverse) only by moving the gearshift lever
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) gears before you shift into R
(Reverse). This is a special lockout feature which prevents you from
shifting into R (Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Fifth).
200
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the
neutral position.
1
3
5
2
4
R
1
3
5
2
4
R
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Depress the clutch, then shift into
1 (First).
201
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
4. Turn the ignition to position 1
(LOCK) to shut the engine off and
remove the ignition key.
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly
and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake
fully.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent 4WD System that
continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the
power distribution between the front and rear wheels. It combines
transparent all-surface operation with highly capable four-wheel drive.
The 4WD system is always active and requires no driver input. It is
capable of handling all road conditions, including street and highway
driving as well as off-road and winter driving.
During very extreme off-road events, the 4WD system has a heat
protection mode to protect itself from damage. If the system detects an
overheat condition, it will enter a locked mode. If the heat in the 4WD
system continues to rise in locked mode, it will disable itself. To exit heat
protection mode, simply stop the vehicle and allow it to cool.
4WD system indicator lights
• Blinks continuously when 4WD
system is disengaged (i.e. two
wheel drive) due to heat
protection mode.
• Blinks several times every minute when 4WD system requires
service. Please bring your vehicle to your local dealer for service.
202
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
4WD system messages in Message Center (if equipped)
• SERVICE 4WD: Displayed when 4WD system requires service. Please
bring your vehicle to your local dealer for service.
• 4WD LOCKED TEMPORARILY: Displayed when 4WD system is
locked (i.e. permanent four wheel drive) due to heat protection mode.
• 4WD DISABLED TEMPORARILY: Displayed when 4WD system is
disengaged (i.e. two wheel drive) due to heat protection mode.
• 4WD AUTO RESTORED: Displayed when normal 4WD system
function is restored when heat protection mode is exited.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
203
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
204
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
205
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
206
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, Do not try to
turnaround because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
207
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use
a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. Since your
vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
apply the brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes
section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the
anti-lock brake system.
4WD vehicles should be driven with traction devices as referred to in
Using snow tires and traction devices in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
208
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in
reverse and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
209
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to 61⁄2
feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gear selector is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is on.
An RSS control allows the driver to
turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be on,
and the gear selector in R (Reverse). The system will remain off until
either the RSS control is pressed again or the ignition is turned off, then
on again. An indicator light on the control will illuminate when the
system is turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is
not turned off, it may indicate a failure in the RSS.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
210
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially if the depth is not known. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of
the wheel rims (for cars). Traction or brake capability may be limited
and your vehicle may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake
and severely damage your engine.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle
slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do
not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes. Driving through deep
water where the transaxle is submerged may allow water into the
transaxle and cause internal damage. Have the fluid checked and,
if water is found, replace the fluid.
211
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12
month period)
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
212
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
instrument panel by the radio. The
hazard flashers will operate when
the ignition is in any position or if
the key is not in the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
213
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
This switch is located in the front
passenger’s footwell, behind a
flip-up cover, by the kick panel
access cover.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
214
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
—
Yellow
—
Brown
—
Black
215
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located on the
right-hand side of the center
console, by the instrument panel.
Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
216
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A*
—
15A*
10A*
2A*
6
15A*
7
10A*
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Trailer tow park lamps
Not used
Front and rear park lamps
Ignition switch
Powertrain Control Module (PCM relay),
Fuel pump relay, Main fan relay, High/Low
speed fan relay 2, PATS module
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL), Stop lamps, PCM, Anti-lock
Brake System (ABS), Speed control, Brake
On-Off switch
Instrument cluster, Diagnostic connector,
Power mirror switch, Radio
217
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
30A**
15A*
15A*
5A*
—
—
30A**
15A*
15A*
10A*
—
15A*
10A*
10A*
—
20A*
20A*
5A*
5A*
10A*
10A*
—
—
10A*
15A*
34
5A*
35
5A*
* Mini fuse ** Cartridge fuse
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Not used
Power door locks, Power seats
Heated mirrors
Sunroof, Electrochromatic mirror
Radio
Not used
Not used
Power windows
Subwoofer
Low beams
4WD
Not used
Horn
Rear wiper motor, Rear wiper washer
Instrument cluster
Not used
Cigar lighter
Front wiper motor, Front wiper washer
Climate control system mode switch
Canister vent, Speed control cancel switch
Instrument cluster
Reverse park aid
Not used
Not used
Brake-Transmission shift lock
Air bag module, Passenger Air bag
Deactivation (PAD) indicator lamp,
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
ABS module, Evac and Fill, Speed control
Heated seats module, 4WD
218
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is
located in the engine compartment.
The power distribution box contains
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
25A*
25A*
Power Distribution Box Description
Not used
Headlamp power
High beams, Turn signals, Interior
lamps, Headlamp power
219
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
5A*
15A*
6
7
20A*
40A**
8
30A**
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
15A*
30A*
10A*
20A*
20A*
15A*
30A*
25A*
50A**
40A**
40A**
20
21
60A**
40A**
22
40A** (I4)
50A** (V6)
40A**
40A** (I4)
50A** (V6)
—
—
—
23
24
25
R2
R3
Power Distribution Box Description
Keep Alive Power (KA PWR)
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO)
sensors
Fuel pump
RUN/ACC relay - Electrochromatic
mirror, Cigar lighter, Front and rear
wipers
Powertrain Control Module (PCM),
Injectors and coil
Alternator
Heated seats
PCM
Power point
Fog lamps
A/C clutch, A/C relay
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) solenoid
I/P fuse panel (RUN/START)
Ignition (main)
Blower motor
Accessory delay relay - Subwoofer and
4WD, Low beam
ABS
Horn, CHMSL, Cluster, Power locks and
power seats
Cooling fan
Rear defroster, Park lamps relay
High/Low speed fan
Shunt
PCM relay
Fuel pump relay
220
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Fuse Amp
Location
Rating
R4
—
R5
—
R6
—
R7
—
R8
—
R9
—
R10
—
D1
—
D2
—
* Mini fuse ** Cartridge fuse
Power Distribution Box Description
Cooling fan relay
High/Low speed fan relay 1
Blower motor relay
Starter relay
High/Low speed fan relay 2
Fog lamps relay
A/C relay
Not used
A/C diode
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
221
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
222
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
223
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
224
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
225
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transaxle.
On 4WD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transaxle, 4WD system or vehicle.
226
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
227
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer for
warranty repairs. While any Ford dealership handling your vehicle line
will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. Please note that
certain warranty repairs require special training and/or equipment, so not
all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take
your vehicle to another dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will
be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other
parts that are authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FORD).
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
228
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
229
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
230
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
231
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
232
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board
at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service
233
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an
impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete
234
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
235
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
236
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your dealer, or an
equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
237
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
238
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
• 2.3L I4
• 3.0L DOHC V6 — Duratec Engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
239
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
240
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
air bags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the seat-mounted side air bag. Such products could contaminate
the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a
collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
241
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
242
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide scheduled maintenance information which makes
tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
243
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N
(Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. At the front of the vehicle, lift up on the auxiliary latch handle located
in the center between the hood and the grille.
3. Lift the hood open and secure it with the prop rod.
244
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.3L I4 engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Automatic transmission dipstick
4. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power distribution box
7. Battery
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
245
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power distribution box
7. Battery
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
246
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to
Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
247
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is within the MIN and MAX marks or the lower and
upper holes, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN mark or the lower hole, engineoil
must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range.
248
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec engine
• If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil
in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine with oil. Oil levels above the MAX
mark or upper hole may cause engine damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be removed from the engine by a qualified
service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
249
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX or FULL mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until it is seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
250
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to scheduled maintenance information
for the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
251
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
252
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
TU
LE
AD
RE
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RN
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The
coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled
water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant
concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester
(such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The
level of coolant should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls
below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant
section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
253
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
254
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA, OR and NM),
VC-7–B (CA, OR and NM), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51–A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 and VC-3
(US) or CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification
WSS-M97B44–D with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft
Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life
product with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded
corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
255
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
256
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (2.3L I4 engine only)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
257
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
indicator light will
• The
illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to
alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air
pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
258
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
259
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel
260
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn to unscrew
the cap.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. Reinstall the cap on the filler pipe and turn it clockwise until at least
one click is heard.
After refueling, if the “CHECK FUEL CAP” indicator comes on and stays
on when you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it securely. The “CHECK FUEL CAP” indicator
should turn off after three driving cycles with the fuel filler cap properly
installed. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine start-up followed by
mixed city/highway driving.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. Remove fuel filler cap
slowly. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in
the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap
to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.
261
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
87
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
262
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
indicator may come on. For more information on the “Check
• The
Engine” indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the
appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
263
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
264
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
265
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
266
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
indicator, charging system warning light or the
Illumination of the
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not
working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
267
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check
engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check
engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run
poorly.)
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the Check engine/Service engine soon light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
indicator is on, refer to
the on-board diagnostics system. If your
the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with
indicator on.
the
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
268
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled
maintenance information for the
service interval schedules. If adding
fluid is necessary, use only
MERCON威 ATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Brake and clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.
269
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of your
brake system could be
compromised; seek service from your dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transaxle does not consume
fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transaxle is not
working properly, i.e., if the transaxle slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the crosshatch zone for normal operating temperature.
270
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperatures 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30
km) of driving.
The transmission fluid should be in
the crosshatch zone if at normal
operating temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the crosshatch
zone may result in transaxle failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick blade and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transaxle component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
271
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible
damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Assure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at bottom of
the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at
the bottom of the opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Refill
capacities in this chapter.
272
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
The clutch master cylinder and
brake master cylinder are part of
the same system; both are refillable
through the brake master cylinder
with brake fluid. For more
information on brake fluid
maintenance, refer to Brake fluid in
this chapter.
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
1. Loosen the clamp that secures the air inlet tube to the engine air filter
cover and disconnect the tube from the cover (for V6 only).
2. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
3. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
4. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
273
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
6. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
7. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
8. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
2.3L I4 engine
3.0L DOHC V6 Duratec
engine
FA-1683
FG-800-A
BXT-40R
FL-820-S
Air filter element 1 FA-1683
Fuel filter
FG-800-A
Battery
BXT-40R
Oil filter
FL-910
2
PCV valve
3
Spark Plugs
1
Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to the
engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the
appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
274
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the
appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid
Ford Part
Name
Brake fluid (and Motorcraft High
clutch fluid if
Performance
equipped)
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Motorcraft SAE
Engine oil
(including filter 5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
change)6
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Fuel tank
N/A
Power steering
fluid
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
Application
Capacity
All
Fill to line on
reservoir
2.3L I4 engine
4.5 quarts
(4.25L)
3.0L V6 Duratec 6.0 quarts
engine
(5.7L)
2.3L I4 engine
16.5 gallons
(62L)
3.0L V6 Duratec 16.5 gallons
engine
(62L)
All
Fill to line on
reservoir
275
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fluid
Ford Part
Name
Motorcraft SAE
75W-90
API GL-4 Gear
Oil
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
Transmission
fluid 1
Power Transfer
Unit
Engine coolant
4
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
276
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Application
Capacity
Manual transaxle
(2WD)
Manual transaxle
(4X4)
2.3L engine with
Automatic
transaxle and oil
cooler
3.0L engine with
Automatic
transaxle and oil
cooler
4X4 (Automatic)
2.4 quarts
(2.3L) 2
2.5 quarts
(2.4L) 2
10.2 quarts
(9.6L) 3
4X4 (Manual)
12 ounces
(0.35L)
2.3L I4 engine
with manual
transaxle
2.3L I4 engine
with automatic
transaxle
3.0L V6 Duratec
engine with
automatic
transaxle
5.3 quarts
(5.0L)
10.2 quarts
(9.6L) 3
12 ounces
(0.35L)
6.3 quarts
(6.0L)
10.6 quarts
(10.0L)
Maintenance and Specifications
Fluid
Rear axle
lubricant
Windshield
washer fluid
Ford Part
Name
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
Application
4X4
Capacity
2.96 pints (1.4L)
5
All
2.7 quarts
(2.6L)
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used.
Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick
blade. MERCON威 and MERCON威 V are not interchangeable. DO
NOT mix MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. Refer to your scheduled
maintenance information to determine the correct service
interval.
2
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
5
Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
6
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
277
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Ford Part
Name or
equivalent
Multi-Purpose
Grease
Body hinges,
latches, door
striker plates
and rollers, seat
tracks, fuel filler
door hinge and
spring, primary
and auxiliary
hood latches
Hydraulic clutch Motorcraft High
fluid and brake Performance
fluid
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Halfshaft CV
Motorcraft
joints
Constant
Velocity Joint
Grease
Engine coolant 1 Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
Engine oil
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
278
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Ford Part
Number
Ford
Specification
XG-4 or XL-5
ESB-M1C93-B
PM-1
ESA-M6C25-A
and DOT 3
XG-5
WSS-M1C258–A1
VC-7–A (U.S.,
except CA, OR
and NM),
VC-7–B (CA, OR
and NM)
XO-5W20-QSP
(US)
CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
WSS-M97B51-A1
WSS-M2C930-A
with API
Certification
Mark
Maintenance and Specifications
Item
Ford Part
Ford Part
Ford
Name or
Number
Specification
equivalent
Manual transaxle Motorcraft SAE F32Z-19C547–MA WSS-M2C203-A1
75W-90 Gear Oil
Motorcraft
XT-2-QDX
MERCON威
Automatic
MERCON威 ATF
transaxle2
Power steering Motorcraft
XT-2-QDX
MERCON威
fluid
MERCON 威ATF
WSP-M2C197-A
Rear axle (4X4)4 Motorcraft SAE XY-80W90-QL
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Power Tranfer
Motorcraft SAE XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-A
Unit
80W-90
(4X4-Manual
Premium Rear
Transaxle)
Axle Lubricant
Power Transfer Motorcraft SAE XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192-A
75W-140
Unit3
(4X4-Automatic Synthetic Rear
Transaxle)
Axle Lubricant
Windshield
Motorcraft
ZC-32–A
WSB-M8B16–A2
washer fluid
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
1
DO NOT USE Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant VC-2. Refer
to Adding engine coolant, in the this chapter.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. MERCON威 and MERCON威 V are not interchangeable. DO NOT
mix MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information to determine the correct service interval.
3
The Power Transfer Unit is lubricated for life with synthetic lube.
Lubricant levels are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or repair required. Replace Power Transfer Unit lubricant with
specified synthetic lubricant anytime the unit is submerged in water.
279
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
4
4X4 vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than
–40° F (-40° C) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number
XY-75W140–QL meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192–A.
ENGINE DATA
Engine
2.3L I4 engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
140
87 octane
1-3-4-2
Coil on plug
0.049–0.053 inch
(1.25–1.35mm)
9.7:1
Compression ratio
3.0L DOHC V6
Duratec engine
183
87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
Coil on plug
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42mm)
10.0:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Dimensions
(1) Vehicle height/ Maximum
height*
(2) Front track / rear
(3) Overall width (body)
(4) Wheelbase
(5) Overall length
4–Door - inches (mm)
69.7 (1770)/70.3 (1786)*
61.3 (1557)/60.9 (1548)
70.1 (1780)
103.1 (2620)
174.9 (4442)
* Denotes a 4x4 vehicle with optional 16” tires
280
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
281
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the structure by the trailing edge of
the driver’s door or the edge of the
driver’s door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
282
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block and transmission.
Transmission/Transaxle code designations
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
vehicle certification label. The
following table tells you which
transmission or transaxle each code
represents.
Code
3
4
Description
Five-speed manual
Four-speed automatic
283
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer.
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you
the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Ford Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000
km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy
of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessory products. Not
all accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Fender flares
Front end covers
Grille inserts
Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Running boards
Splash guards
Step Bars
Wheels
284
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Leather wrapped steering wheels
Scuff plates
Lifestyle
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
Mobile-ease hands-free communication system
Rear seat entertainment systems
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
First aid and highway safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Navigation systems
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
285
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Accessories
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
286
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................64
Air cleaner filter ...............273–274
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................120, 127, 130
and child safety seats ............122
description ..............120, 127, 130
disposal ....................................132
driver airbag ............122, 128, 131
indicator light .........126, 129, 132
operation .................122, 128, 131
passenger airbag .....122, 128, 131
side airbag ...............................130
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................202
Ambulance packages ....................7
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................253
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................190
Anti-theft system ........................97
arming the system ....................97
disarming a triggered system ..98
Audio system
(see Radio) ..........17, 20, 24, 32, 37
Automatic transaxle
fluid, adding ............................270
fluid, checking ........................270
Automatic transmission ............193
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................196
fluid, refill capacities ..............275
fluid, specification ..................280
Auxiliary power point .................62
Axle
lubricant
specifications ..................278, 280
refill capacities ........................275
B
Battery .......................................251
acid, treating emergencies .....251
jumping a disabled battery ....221
maintenance-free ....................251
replacement, specifications ...274
servicing ..................................251
BeltMinder .................................115
Brakes ........................................190
anti-lock ...................................190
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................191
fluid, checking and adding ....269
fluid, refill capacities ..............275
fluid, specifications .........278, 280
lubricant
specifications ..................278, 280
parking ....................................191
shift interlock ..........................193
Bulbs ............................................53
C
Calculating load ........................180
Capacities for refilling fluids ....275
Cargo area shade ........................77
Cargo cover .................................78
Cassette tape player ...................24
Cell phone use ............................68
Certification Label ....................282
Child safety restraints ..............133
child safety belts ....................133
Child safety seats ......................136
attaching with tether
straps .......................................140
287
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
in front seat ............................137
in rear seat ..............................137
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............238
instrument panel ....................240
interior .....................................241
interior trim ............................240
plastic parts ............................239
washing ....................................237
waxing .....................................237
wheels ......................................238
wiper blades ............................240
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......44–45
Clock ............................................38
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .......................26, 30
AM/FM/CD ...........................17, 34
AM/FM/Tape/CD .................21, 38
Single CD ..................................34
Clutch
fluid ..................................269, 273
operation while driving ..........199
recommended shift speeds ....200
Console ........................................68
overhead ....................................60
Controls
power seat ...............................100
Coolant
checking and adding ..............253
refill capacities ................256, 275
specifications ..................278, 280
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................65
Customer Assistance ................212
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................242
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................234
288
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............235
Getting roadside assistance ...212
Getting the service you
need .........................................228
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................235
The Dispute Settlement
Board .......................................231
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................233
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................48
Defrost
rear window ..............................46
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................270
engine oil .................................247
Doors
lubricant specifications ..........278
Driving under special
conditions ..................198, 204, 206
sand .........................................205
snow and ice ...........................207
through water .................206, 211
E
Electronic message center .........69
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................221
Emission control system ..........266
Engine ........................................280
cleaning ...................................238
coolant .....................................253
Index
fail-safe cooling .......................257
idle speed control ...................251
lubrication
specifications ..................278, 280
refill capacities ........................275
service points ..................245–246
starting after a collision .........213
Engine block heater .................189
Engine oil ..................................247
checking and adding ..............247
dipstick ....................................247
filter, specifications ........250, 274
recommendations ...................250
refill capacities ........................275
specifications ..................278, 280
Exhaust fumes ..........................189
F
Fail safe cooling ........................257
Fluid capacities .........................275
Foglamps .....................................48
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................203
indicator light .........................202
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................192
Fuel ............................................259
calculating fuel
economy ............................70, 263
cap ...........................................261
capacity ...................................275
choosing the right fuel ...........262
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................266
detergent in fuel .....................263
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................259, 261, 263
filter, specifications ........263, 274
fuel pump shut-off switch .....213
improving fuel economy ........263
octane rating ...................262, 280
quality ......................................262
running out of fuel .................263
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................259
Fuses ..................................214, 216
G
Garage door opener ....................61
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............261
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................263
Gauges .........................................14
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
calculating ...............................180
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
calculating ...............................180
H
Hazard flashers .........................213
Head restraints ...................99, 101
Headlamps ...................................47
aiming ........................................50
autolamp system .......................47
bulb specifications ....................53
daytime running lights .............48
flash to pass ..............................49
high beam .................................49
replacing bulbs .........................54
turning on and off ....................47
Heating
heater only system ...................44
Hood ..........................................244
I
Ignition ...............................186, 280
289
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................136
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................268
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................240
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................49
J
Jump-starting your vehicle ......221
K
Keys
positions of the ignition .........186
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................47
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................53
daytime running light ...............48
fog lamps ...................................48
headlamps .................................47
headlamps, flash to pass ..........49
instrument panel, dimming .....49
interior lamps ...............51–52, 54
replacing bulbs .......53–54, 56–57
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................51
Liftgate ........................................77
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........191
Load limits .................................173
Loading instructions .................180
290
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Locks
childproof ..................................89
Lubricant specifications ...278, 280
Lug nuts ....................................163
Luggage rack ...............................78
M
Manual transaxle .......................199
fluid, checking and adding ....272
reverse .....................................200
Manual transmission
fluid capacities ........................275
lubricant specifications ..........280
Message center .....................69–70
english/metric button ...............71
system check button ................72
warning messages .....................73
Mirrors .........................................62
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................65
fold away ...................................64
heated ........................................65
side view mirrors (power) .......64
Moon roof ....................................69
Motorcraft parts ................263, 274
O
Octane rating ............................262
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................247
Overdrive ...................................195
P
Parking .......................................201
Parking brake ............................191
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....274
Index
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................108
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................219
Power mirrors .............................64
Power point .................................62
Power steering ..........................192
fluid, checking and adding ....269
fluid, refill capacity ................275
fluid, specifications .........278, 280
Power Windows ...........................63
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................192
R
Radio ....................17, 20, 24, 32, 37
Rear window defroster ...............46
Relays ........................................214
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ..........53, 93–94
Reverse sensing system ...........209
Roadside assistance ..................212
Roof rack .....................................78
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........119
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..................106, 110–114
Safety Canopy ...................127, 131
Safety defects, reporting ..........236
Safety restraints ........106, 110–114
belt minder .............................115
extension assembly ................114
for adults .........................111–113
for children .............................133
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................108
safety belt maintenance .........119
warning light and chime ........115
Safety seats for children ..........136
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............106
Seats ............................................99
child safety seats ....................136
heated ......................................101
Servicing your vehicle ..............243
Setting the clock
AM/FM/CD .................................17
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ..........26, 30
AM/FM/Tape/CD .................21, 38
Snowplowing .................................7
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................274, 280
Special notice
ambulance conversions ..............7
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................278, 280
Speed control ..............................65
Starting your
vehicle ........................186–187, 189
jump starting ..........................221
Steering wheel
tilting .........................................60
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) .................44
Tilt steering wheel ......................60
Tires ...................................146–147
alignment ................................170
291
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Index
care ..........................................169
changing ..................................153
checking the pressure ............149
inspecting and inflating .........148
label .........................................168
replacing ..................................151
rotating ....................................171
safety practices .......................170
sidewall information ...............163
snow tires and chains ............172
spare tire .................................152
terminology .............................147
tire grades ...............................147
treadwear ........................146, 169
Towing .......................................180
recreational towing .................185
trailer towing ..........................180
wrecker ....................................226
Transaxle
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................272
manual operation ....................199
Transmission
automatic operation ...............193
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....193
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................270
292
2005 Escape (204)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
fluid, refill capacities ..............275
lubricant
specifications ..................278, 280
Turn signal ..................................51
V
Vehicle dimensions ...................280
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................282
Vehicle loading ..........................173
Ventilating your vehicle ...........190
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................247
Water, Driving through .............211
Windows
power .........................................63
rear wiper/washer .....................59
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers
checking and adding fluid .....247
liftgate reservoir .....................247
operation ...................................58
replacing wiper blades .............59
Wrecker towing .........................226
293
294
295
296